Sangyub BAEK(Muroran Institute of Technology)

Ainu and Tungusic from the perspective of linguistic typology and areal linguistics

Ainu and Tungusic from the perspective of linguistic typology and areal linguistics

Approaches to Endangered Languages in Japan and Northeast Asia Description Documentationand Revitalization (NINJAL Lecture Hall Aug 5-8 2018)

0 Tungusic languages

A language family consisting of 10-11 languagesdistributed across Russian and Chinese territories

(1) Russian side-Eastern Siberia-Lower Amur River Primorskii Krai-Sakhalin Island

(2) Chinese side-Northeastern Province-Xinjiang Uyghur autonomous province

2

01 Tungusic distribution (Tsumagari 1997a)

Hezhen

3

Evenki Even Negidal SolonII

Udihe Orochi HezhenIIII

Nanay Ulcha UiltaIIIIII

ManchuIVIV

02 Genetical classification of Tungusic

(Ikegami 1974 Kazama 1996)

03 Geographical classification of Tungusic

(a) North Tungusic (Evenki Even) Eastern Siberia

(b) East Tungusic (Negidal Ulcha Nanay Orochi Uilta Udihe) Lower Amur River Primorskii Krai Sakhalin Island

(c) South Tungusic (Solon Hezhen Manchu and Sibe) Northeastern Province

Xinjiang Uyghur autonomous province

5

1 Typological comparison between Tungusic and Ainu

1 Typological comparison between Tungusic and Ainu

6

1 Typological comparison of Tungusic and Ainu

Tungusic Ainu

vowel harmony

agglutinativepolysyntheticincorporating

SOV

case-marking

postposition

suffixation-oriented prefixation-oriented7

2 Language contactbetween Tungusic and Ainu

2 Language contactbetween Tungusic and Ainu

8

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

9

21 Previous studies on language contact at lexical level

10

-Hattori (1952 [2004])-Krejnovich (1955)-Austerlitz (1968)-Ikegami (1980 1988 1990)-Tangiku (2003)-Tsumagari (2009c)

Several attempts clarifying language contact inTungusic Ainu and Nivku at lexical aspect havebeen made so far as follows

211 Austerlitz (1968)

bearded seal (Erignathus barbatus nauticus Pallas)

Uilta Ainu Nivkh

~1 year old amɔspi amsp amuacutespe

~2 year old ceeŋa the-ŋa(ciyanka)

~3 year old ɔǰii the-ŋa-aki

more than 3 years old dәriәәci

grown dawŋgari dawɣř tauacutenkaritukara poroacutep

(Austerlitz 1968 135)

212 Ikegami (1980 1990 1994) Krejnovich (1955)

Uilta(Tungusic)

Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh Manchu

(Tungusic)

hundred taŋgu tanku ɲřaŋq tanggū

Russian luča nuca ločrsquoa

dog collar xala seta hana hal(ŋ)

chopsticks sabuu saxha črsquoafq sabka

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

13

22 Previous studies on language contact at grammatical level

14

With regard to grammatical aspect relevantresearch still remains at its early stage and isextremely limited as attested below

-Tsumagari (1997b)-Yamada (2008)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-kkәә -ka -xә

15

Tsumagari (1997b) shows that there is a morpho-syntactic similarity in noun coordinative forms inUilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh

∙ Uilta (Tungusic)2-1) sii-kkәә bii-kkәә ŋәnnee-pu

2SGNOM-COOR 1SGNOM-COOR go+PTCPPST-1PLʻYou and I wentʼ

(Ikegami 1994160)∙ Sakhalin Ainu 2-2) ohkayo-ka mahtekuh-ka okaya-hci

man-COOR woman-COOR be(PL)-PLʻThere are men and womenʼ

(Hattori 1981[1964]325)∙ Nivkh2-3) vәtәk-xә vәmәk-xә maŋgut ezmu-drsquo-gu

father-COOR mother-COOR very beglad-FINIT-PLʻHis father and mother are very gladʼ

(Panfilov 1962165)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

222 Yamada (2008)

-Sakhalin Ainu manu-Uilta =ndAA-Nivkh furu

17

Yamada (2008) focuses on a possibility oflanguage contact in hearsay forms frequentlyconfirmed in folklores in Uilta Sakhalin Ainuand Nivkh

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

0 Tungusic languages

A language family consisting of 10-11 languagesdistributed across Russian and Chinese territories

(1) Russian side-Eastern Siberia-Lower Amur River Primorskii Krai-Sakhalin Island

(2) Chinese side-Northeastern Province-Xinjiang Uyghur autonomous province

2

01 Tungusic distribution (Tsumagari 1997a)

Hezhen

3

Evenki Even Negidal SolonII

Udihe Orochi HezhenIIII

Nanay Ulcha UiltaIIIIII

ManchuIVIV

02 Genetical classification of Tungusic

(Ikegami 1974 Kazama 1996)

03 Geographical classification of Tungusic

(a) North Tungusic (Evenki Even) Eastern Siberia

(b) East Tungusic (Negidal Ulcha Nanay Orochi Uilta Udihe) Lower Amur River Primorskii Krai Sakhalin Island

(c) South Tungusic (Solon Hezhen Manchu and Sibe) Northeastern Province

Xinjiang Uyghur autonomous province

5

1 Typological comparison between Tungusic and Ainu

1 Typological comparison between Tungusic and Ainu

6

1 Typological comparison of Tungusic and Ainu

Tungusic Ainu

vowel harmony

agglutinativepolysyntheticincorporating

SOV

case-marking

postposition

suffixation-oriented prefixation-oriented7

2 Language contactbetween Tungusic and Ainu

2 Language contactbetween Tungusic and Ainu

8

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

9

21 Previous studies on language contact at lexical level

10

-Hattori (1952 [2004])-Krejnovich (1955)-Austerlitz (1968)-Ikegami (1980 1988 1990)-Tangiku (2003)-Tsumagari (2009c)

Several attempts clarifying language contact inTungusic Ainu and Nivku at lexical aspect havebeen made so far as follows

211 Austerlitz (1968)

bearded seal (Erignathus barbatus nauticus Pallas)

Uilta Ainu Nivkh

~1 year old amɔspi amsp amuacutespe

~2 year old ceeŋa the-ŋa(ciyanka)

~3 year old ɔǰii the-ŋa-aki

more than 3 years old dәriәәci

grown dawŋgari dawɣř tauacutenkaritukara poroacutep

(Austerlitz 1968 135)

212 Ikegami (1980 1990 1994) Krejnovich (1955)

Uilta(Tungusic)

Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh Manchu

(Tungusic)

hundred taŋgu tanku ɲřaŋq tanggū

Russian luča nuca ločrsquoa

dog collar xala seta hana hal(ŋ)

chopsticks sabuu saxha črsquoafq sabka

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

13

22 Previous studies on language contact at grammatical level

14

With regard to grammatical aspect relevantresearch still remains at its early stage and isextremely limited as attested below

-Tsumagari (1997b)-Yamada (2008)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-kkәә -ka -xә

15

Tsumagari (1997b) shows that there is a morpho-syntactic similarity in noun coordinative forms inUilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh

∙ Uilta (Tungusic)2-1) sii-kkәә bii-kkәә ŋәnnee-pu

2SGNOM-COOR 1SGNOM-COOR go+PTCPPST-1PLʻYou and I wentʼ

(Ikegami 1994160)∙ Sakhalin Ainu 2-2) ohkayo-ka mahtekuh-ka okaya-hci

man-COOR woman-COOR be(PL)-PLʻThere are men and womenʼ

(Hattori 1981[1964]325)∙ Nivkh2-3) vәtәk-xә vәmәk-xә maŋgut ezmu-drsquo-gu

father-COOR mother-COOR very beglad-FINIT-PLʻHis father and mother are very gladʼ

(Panfilov 1962165)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

222 Yamada (2008)

-Sakhalin Ainu manu-Uilta =ndAA-Nivkh furu

17

Yamada (2008) focuses on a possibility oflanguage contact in hearsay forms frequentlyconfirmed in folklores in Uilta Sakhalin Ainuand Nivkh

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

01 Tungusic distribution (Tsumagari 1997a)

Hezhen

3

Evenki Even Negidal SolonII

Udihe Orochi HezhenIIII

Nanay Ulcha UiltaIIIIII

ManchuIVIV

02 Genetical classification of Tungusic

(Ikegami 1974 Kazama 1996)

03 Geographical classification of Tungusic

(a) North Tungusic (Evenki Even) Eastern Siberia

(b) East Tungusic (Negidal Ulcha Nanay Orochi Uilta Udihe) Lower Amur River Primorskii Krai Sakhalin Island

(c) South Tungusic (Solon Hezhen Manchu and Sibe) Northeastern Province

Xinjiang Uyghur autonomous province

5

1 Typological comparison between Tungusic and Ainu

1 Typological comparison between Tungusic and Ainu

6

1 Typological comparison of Tungusic and Ainu

Tungusic Ainu

vowel harmony

agglutinativepolysyntheticincorporating

SOV

case-marking

postposition

suffixation-oriented prefixation-oriented7

2 Language contactbetween Tungusic and Ainu

2 Language contactbetween Tungusic and Ainu

8

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

9

21 Previous studies on language contact at lexical level

10

-Hattori (1952 [2004])-Krejnovich (1955)-Austerlitz (1968)-Ikegami (1980 1988 1990)-Tangiku (2003)-Tsumagari (2009c)

Several attempts clarifying language contact inTungusic Ainu and Nivku at lexical aspect havebeen made so far as follows

211 Austerlitz (1968)

bearded seal (Erignathus barbatus nauticus Pallas)

Uilta Ainu Nivkh

~1 year old amɔspi amsp amuacutespe

~2 year old ceeŋa the-ŋa(ciyanka)

~3 year old ɔǰii the-ŋa-aki

more than 3 years old dәriәәci

grown dawŋgari dawɣř tauacutenkaritukara poroacutep

(Austerlitz 1968 135)

212 Ikegami (1980 1990 1994) Krejnovich (1955)

Uilta(Tungusic)

Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh Manchu

(Tungusic)

hundred taŋgu tanku ɲřaŋq tanggū

Russian luča nuca ločrsquoa

dog collar xala seta hana hal(ŋ)

chopsticks sabuu saxha črsquoafq sabka

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

13

22 Previous studies on language contact at grammatical level

14

With regard to grammatical aspect relevantresearch still remains at its early stage and isextremely limited as attested below

-Tsumagari (1997b)-Yamada (2008)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-kkәә -ka -xә

15

Tsumagari (1997b) shows that there is a morpho-syntactic similarity in noun coordinative forms inUilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh

∙ Uilta (Tungusic)2-1) sii-kkәә bii-kkәә ŋәnnee-pu

2SGNOM-COOR 1SGNOM-COOR go+PTCPPST-1PLʻYou and I wentʼ

(Ikegami 1994160)∙ Sakhalin Ainu 2-2) ohkayo-ka mahtekuh-ka okaya-hci

man-COOR woman-COOR be(PL)-PLʻThere are men and womenʼ

(Hattori 1981[1964]325)∙ Nivkh2-3) vәtәk-xә vәmәk-xә maŋgut ezmu-drsquo-gu

father-COOR mother-COOR very beglad-FINIT-PLʻHis father and mother are very gladʼ

(Panfilov 1962165)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

222 Yamada (2008)

-Sakhalin Ainu manu-Uilta =ndAA-Nivkh furu

17

Yamada (2008) focuses on a possibility oflanguage contact in hearsay forms frequentlyconfirmed in folklores in Uilta Sakhalin Ainuand Nivkh

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

Evenki Even Negidal SolonII

Udihe Orochi HezhenIIII

Nanay Ulcha UiltaIIIIII

ManchuIVIV

02 Genetical classification of Tungusic

(Ikegami 1974 Kazama 1996)

03 Geographical classification of Tungusic

(a) North Tungusic (Evenki Even) Eastern Siberia

(b) East Tungusic (Negidal Ulcha Nanay Orochi Uilta Udihe) Lower Amur River Primorskii Krai Sakhalin Island

(c) South Tungusic (Solon Hezhen Manchu and Sibe) Northeastern Province

Xinjiang Uyghur autonomous province

5

1 Typological comparison between Tungusic and Ainu

1 Typological comparison between Tungusic and Ainu

6

1 Typological comparison of Tungusic and Ainu

Tungusic Ainu

vowel harmony

agglutinativepolysyntheticincorporating

SOV

case-marking

postposition

suffixation-oriented prefixation-oriented7

2 Language contactbetween Tungusic and Ainu

2 Language contactbetween Tungusic and Ainu

8

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

9

21 Previous studies on language contact at lexical level

10

-Hattori (1952 [2004])-Krejnovich (1955)-Austerlitz (1968)-Ikegami (1980 1988 1990)-Tangiku (2003)-Tsumagari (2009c)

Several attempts clarifying language contact inTungusic Ainu and Nivku at lexical aspect havebeen made so far as follows

211 Austerlitz (1968)

bearded seal (Erignathus barbatus nauticus Pallas)

Uilta Ainu Nivkh

~1 year old amɔspi amsp amuacutespe

~2 year old ceeŋa the-ŋa(ciyanka)

~3 year old ɔǰii the-ŋa-aki

more than 3 years old dәriәәci

grown dawŋgari dawɣř tauacutenkaritukara poroacutep

(Austerlitz 1968 135)

212 Ikegami (1980 1990 1994) Krejnovich (1955)

Uilta(Tungusic)

Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh Manchu

(Tungusic)

hundred taŋgu tanku ɲřaŋq tanggū

Russian luča nuca ločrsquoa

dog collar xala seta hana hal(ŋ)

chopsticks sabuu saxha črsquoafq sabka

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

13

22 Previous studies on language contact at grammatical level

14

With regard to grammatical aspect relevantresearch still remains at its early stage and isextremely limited as attested below

-Tsumagari (1997b)-Yamada (2008)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-kkәә -ka -xә

15

Tsumagari (1997b) shows that there is a morpho-syntactic similarity in noun coordinative forms inUilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh

∙ Uilta (Tungusic)2-1) sii-kkәә bii-kkәә ŋәnnee-pu

2SGNOM-COOR 1SGNOM-COOR go+PTCPPST-1PLʻYou and I wentʼ

(Ikegami 1994160)∙ Sakhalin Ainu 2-2) ohkayo-ka mahtekuh-ka okaya-hci

man-COOR woman-COOR be(PL)-PLʻThere are men and womenʼ

(Hattori 1981[1964]325)∙ Nivkh2-3) vәtәk-xә vәmәk-xә maŋgut ezmu-drsquo-gu

father-COOR mother-COOR very beglad-FINIT-PLʻHis father and mother are very gladʼ

(Panfilov 1962165)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

222 Yamada (2008)

-Sakhalin Ainu manu-Uilta =ndAA-Nivkh furu

17

Yamada (2008) focuses on a possibility oflanguage contact in hearsay forms frequentlyconfirmed in folklores in Uilta Sakhalin Ainuand Nivkh

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

03 Geographical classification of Tungusic

(a) North Tungusic (Evenki Even) Eastern Siberia

(b) East Tungusic (Negidal Ulcha Nanay Orochi Uilta Udihe) Lower Amur River Primorskii Krai Sakhalin Island

(c) South Tungusic (Solon Hezhen Manchu and Sibe) Northeastern Province

Xinjiang Uyghur autonomous province

5

1 Typological comparison between Tungusic and Ainu

1 Typological comparison between Tungusic and Ainu

6

1 Typological comparison of Tungusic and Ainu

Tungusic Ainu

vowel harmony

agglutinativepolysyntheticincorporating

SOV

case-marking

postposition

suffixation-oriented prefixation-oriented7

2 Language contactbetween Tungusic and Ainu

2 Language contactbetween Tungusic and Ainu

8

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

9

21 Previous studies on language contact at lexical level

10

-Hattori (1952 [2004])-Krejnovich (1955)-Austerlitz (1968)-Ikegami (1980 1988 1990)-Tangiku (2003)-Tsumagari (2009c)

Several attempts clarifying language contact inTungusic Ainu and Nivku at lexical aspect havebeen made so far as follows

211 Austerlitz (1968)

bearded seal (Erignathus barbatus nauticus Pallas)

Uilta Ainu Nivkh

~1 year old amɔspi amsp amuacutespe

~2 year old ceeŋa the-ŋa(ciyanka)

~3 year old ɔǰii the-ŋa-aki

more than 3 years old dәriәәci

grown dawŋgari dawɣř tauacutenkaritukara poroacutep

(Austerlitz 1968 135)

212 Ikegami (1980 1990 1994) Krejnovich (1955)

Uilta(Tungusic)

Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh Manchu

(Tungusic)

hundred taŋgu tanku ɲřaŋq tanggū

Russian luča nuca ločrsquoa

dog collar xala seta hana hal(ŋ)

chopsticks sabuu saxha črsquoafq sabka

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

13

22 Previous studies on language contact at grammatical level

14

With regard to grammatical aspect relevantresearch still remains at its early stage and isextremely limited as attested below

-Tsumagari (1997b)-Yamada (2008)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-kkәә -ka -xә

15

Tsumagari (1997b) shows that there is a morpho-syntactic similarity in noun coordinative forms inUilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh

∙ Uilta (Tungusic)2-1) sii-kkәә bii-kkәә ŋәnnee-pu

2SGNOM-COOR 1SGNOM-COOR go+PTCPPST-1PLʻYou and I wentʼ

(Ikegami 1994160)∙ Sakhalin Ainu 2-2) ohkayo-ka mahtekuh-ka okaya-hci

man-COOR woman-COOR be(PL)-PLʻThere are men and womenʼ

(Hattori 1981[1964]325)∙ Nivkh2-3) vәtәk-xә vәmәk-xә maŋgut ezmu-drsquo-gu

father-COOR mother-COOR very beglad-FINIT-PLʻHis father and mother are very gladʼ

(Panfilov 1962165)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

222 Yamada (2008)

-Sakhalin Ainu manu-Uilta =ndAA-Nivkh furu

17

Yamada (2008) focuses on a possibility oflanguage contact in hearsay forms frequentlyconfirmed in folklores in Uilta Sakhalin Ainuand Nivkh

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

1 Typological comparison between Tungusic and Ainu

1 Typological comparison between Tungusic and Ainu

6

1 Typological comparison of Tungusic and Ainu

Tungusic Ainu

vowel harmony

agglutinativepolysyntheticincorporating

SOV

case-marking

postposition

suffixation-oriented prefixation-oriented7

2 Language contactbetween Tungusic and Ainu

2 Language contactbetween Tungusic and Ainu

8

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

9

21 Previous studies on language contact at lexical level

10

-Hattori (1952 [2004])-Krejnovich (1955)-Austerlitz (1968)-Ikegami (1980 1988 1990)-Tangiku (2003)-Tsumagari (2009c)

Several attempts clarifying language contact inTungusic Ainu and Nivku at lexical aspect havebeen made so far as follows

211 Austerlitz (1968)

bearded seal (Erignathus barbatus nauticus Pallas)

Uilta Ainu Nivkh

~1 year old amɔspi amsp amuacutespe

~2 year old ceeŋa the-ŋa(ciyanka)

~3 year old ɔǰii the-ŋa-aki

more than 3 years old dәriәәci

grown dawŋgari dawɣř tauacutenkaritukara poroacutep

(Austerlitz 1968 135)

212 Ikegami (1980 1990 1994) Krejnovich (1955)

Uilta(Tungusic)

Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh Manchu

(Tungusic)

hundred taŋgu tanku ɲřaŋq tanggū

Russian luča nuca ločrsquoa

dog collar xala seta hana hal(ŋ)

chopsticks sabuu saxha črsquoafq sabka

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

13

22 Previous studies on language contact at grammatical level

14

With regard to grammatical aspect relevantresearch still remains at its early stage and isextremely limited as attested below

-Tsumagari (1997b)-Yamada (2008)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-kkәә -ka -xә

15

Tsumagari (1997b) shows that there is a morpho-syntactic similarity in noun coordinative forms inUilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh

∙ Uilta (Tungusic)2-1) sii-kkәә bii-kkәә ŋәnnee-pu

2SGNOM-COOR 1SGNOM-COOR go+PTCPPST-1PLʻYou and I wentʼ

(Ikegami 1994160)∙ Sakhalin Ainu 2-2) ohkayo-ka mahtekuh-ka okaya-hci

man-COOR woman-COOR be(PL)-PLʻThere are men and womenʼ

(Hattori 1981[1964]325)∙ Nivkh2-3) vәtәk-xә vәmәk-xә maŋgut ezmu-drsquo-gu

father-COOR mother-COOR very beglad-FINIT-PLʻHis father and mother are very gladʼ

(Panfilov 1962165)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

222 Yamada (2008)

-Sakhalin Ainu manu-Uilta =ndAA-Nivkh furu

17

Yamada (2008) focuses on a possibility oflanguage contact in hearsay forms frequentlyconfirmed in folklores in Uilta Sakhalin Ainuand Nivkh

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

1 Typological comparison of Tungusic and Ainu

Tungusic Ainu

vowel harmony

agglutinativepolysyntheticincorporating

SOV

case-marking

postposition

suffixation-oriented prefixation-oriented7

2 Language contactbetween Tungusic and Ainu

2 Language contactbetween Tungusic and Ainu

8

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

9

21 Previous studies on language contact at lexical level

10

-Hattori (1952 [2004])-Krejnovich (1955)-Austerlitz (1968)-Ikegami (1980 1988 1990)-Tangiku (2003)-Tsumagari (2009c)

Several attempts clarifying language contact inTungusic Ainu and Nivku at lexical aspect havebeen made so far as follows

211 Austerlitz (1968)

bearded seal (Erignathus barbatus nauticus Pallas)

Uilta Ainu Nivkh

~1 year old amɔspi amsp amuacutespe

~2 year old ceeŋa the-ŋa(ciyanka)

~3 year old ɔǰii the-ŋa-aki

more than 3 years old dәriәәci

grown dawŋgari dawɣř tauacutenkaritukara poroacutep

(Austerlitz 1968 135)

212 Ikegami (1980 1990 1994) Krejnovich (1955)

Uilta(Tungusic)

Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh Manchu

(Tungusic)

hundred taŋgu tanku ɲřaŋq tanggū

Russian luča nuca ločrsquoa

dog collar xala seta hana hal(ŋ)

chopsticks sabuu saxha črsquoafq sabka

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

13

22 Previous studies on language contact at grammatical level

14

With regard to grammatical aspect relevantresearch still remains at its early stage and isextremely limited as attested below

-Tsumagari (1997b)-Yamada (2008)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-kkәә -ka -xә

15

Tsumagari (1997b) shows that there is a morpho-syntactic similarity in noun coordinative forms inUilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh

∙ Uilta (Tungusic)2-1) sii-kkәә bii-kkәә ŋәnnee-pu

2SGNOM-COOR 1SGNOM-COOR go+PTCPPST-1PLʻYou and I wentʼ

(Ikegami 1994160)∙ Sakhalin Ainu 2-2) ohkayo-ka mahtekuh-ka okaya-hci

man-COOR woman-COOR be(PL)-PLʻThere are men and womenʼ

(Hattori 1981[1964]325)∙ Nivkh2-3) vәtәk-xә vәmәk-xә maŋgut ezmu-drsquo-gu

father-COOR mother-COOR very beglad-FINIT-PLʻHis father and mother are very gladʼ

(Panfilov 1962165)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

222 Yamada (2008)

-Sakhalin Ainu manu-Uilta =ndAA-Nivkh furu

17

Yamada (2008) focuses on a possibility oflanguage contact in hearsay forms frequentlyconfirmed in folklores in Uilta Sakhalin Ainuand Nivkh

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

2 Language contactbetween Tungusic and Ainu

2 Language contactbetween Tungusic and Ainu

8

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

9

21 Previous studies on language contact at lexical level

10

-Hattori (1952 [2004])-Krejnovich (1955)-Austerlitz (1968)-Ikegami (1980 1988 1990)-Tangiku (2003)-Tsumagari (2009c)

Several attempts clarifying language contact inTungusic Ainu and Nivku at lexical aspect havebeen made so far as follows

211 Austerlitz (1968)

bearded seal (Erignathus barbatus nauticus Pallas)

Uilta Ainu Nivkh

~1 year old amɔspi amsp amuacutespe

~2 year old ceeŋa the-ŋa(ciyanka)

~3 year old ɔǰii the-ŋa-aki

more than 3 years old dәriәәci

grown dawŋgari dawɣř tauacutenkaritukara poroacutep

(Austerlitz 1968 135)

212 Ikegami (1980 1990 1994) Krejnovich (1955)

Uilta(Tungusic)

Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh Manchu

(Tungusic)

hundred taŋgu tanku ɲřaŋq tanggū

Russian luča nuca ločrsquoa

dog collar xala seta hana hal(ŋ)

chopsticks sabuu saxha črsquoafq sabka

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

13

22 Previous studies on language contact at grammatical level

14

With regard to grammatical aspect relevantresearch still remains at its early stage and isextremely limited as attested below

-Tsumagari (1997b)-Yamada (2008)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-kkәә -ka -xә

15

Tsumagari (1997b) shows that there is a morpho-syntactic similarity in noun coordinative forms inUilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh

∙ Uilta (Tungusic)2-1) sii-kkәә bii-kkәә ŋәnnee-pu

2SGNOM-COOR 1SGNOM-COOR go+PTCPPST-1PLʻYou and I wentʼ

(Ikegami 1994160)∙ Sakhalin Ainu 2-2) ohkayo-ka mahtekuh-ka okaya-hci

man-COOR woman-COOR be(PL)-PLʻThere are men and womenʼ

(Hattori 1981[1964]325)∙ Nivkh2-3) vәtәk-xә vәmәk-xә maŋgut ezmu-drsquo-gu

father-COOR mother-COOR very beglad-FINIT-PLʻHis father and mother are very gladʼ

(Panfilov 1962165)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

222 Yamada (2008)

-Sakhalin Ainu manu-Uilta =ndAA-Nivkh furu

17

Yamada (2008) focuses on a possibility oflanguage contact in hearsay forms frequentlyconfirmed in folklores in Uilta Sakhalin Ainuand Nivkh

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

21 Language contact at lexical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

9

21 Previous studies on language contact at lexical level

10

-Hattori (1952 [2004])-Krejnovich (1955)-Austerlitz (1968)-Ikegami (1980 1988 1990)-Tangiku (2003)-Tsumagari (2009c)

Several attempts clarifying language contact inTungusic Ainu and Nivku at lexical aspect havebeen made so far as follows

211 Austerlitz (1968)

bearded seal (Erignathus barbatus nauticus Pallas)

Uilta Ainu Nivkh

~1 year old amɔspi amsp amuacutespe

~2 year old ceeŋa the-ŋa(ciyanka)

~3 year old ɔǰii the-ŋa-aki

more than 3 years old dәriәәci

grown dawŋgari dawɣř tauacutenkaritukara poroacutep

(Austerlitz 1968 135)

212 Ikegami (1980 1990 1994) Krejnovich (1955)

Uilta(Tungusic)

Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh Manchu

(Tungusic)

hundred taŋgu tanku ɲřaŋq tanggū

Russian luča nuca ločrsquoa

dog collar xala seta hana hal(ŋ)

chopsticks sabuu saxha črsquoafq sabka

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

13

22 Previous studies on language contact at grammatical level

14

With regard to grammatical aspect relevantresearch still remains at its early stage and isextremely limited as attested below

-Tsumagari (1997b)-Yamada (2008)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-kkәә -ka -xә

15

Tsumagari (1997b) shows that there is a morpho-syntactic similarity in noun coordinative forms inUilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh

∙ Uilta (Tungusic)2-1) sii-kkәә bii-kkәә ŋәnnee-pu

2SGNOM-COOR 1SGNOM-COOR go+PTCPPST-1PLʻYou and I wentʼ

(Ikegami 1994160)∙ Sakhalin Ainu 2-2) ohkayo-ka mahtekuh-ka okaya-hci

man-COOR woman-COOR be(PL)-PLʻThere are men and womenʼ

(Hattori 1981[1964]325)∙ Nivkh2-3) vәtәk-xә vәmәk-xә maŋgut ezmu-drsquo-gu

father-COOR mother-COOR very beglad-FINIT-PLʻHis father and mother are very gladʼ

(Panfilov 1962165)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

222 Yamada (2008)

-Sakhalin Ainu manu-Uilta =ndAA-Nivkh furu

17

Yamada (2008) focuses on a possibility oflanguage contact in hearsay forms frequentlyconfirmed in folklores in Uilta Sakhalin Ainuand Nivkh

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

21 Previous studies on language contact at lexical level

10

-Hattori (1952 [2004])-Krejnovich (1955)-Austerlitz (1968)-Ikegami (1980 1988 1990)-Tangiku (2003)-Tsumagari (2009c)

Several attempts clarifying language contact inTungusic Ainu and Nivku at lexical aspect havebeen made so far as follows

211 Austerlitz (1968)

bearded seal (Erignathus barbatus nauticus Pallas)

Uilta Ainu Nivkh

~1 year old amɔspi amsp amuacutespe

~2 year old ceeŋa the-ŋa(ciyanka)

~3 year old ɔǰii the-ŋa-aki

more than 3 years old dәriәәci

grown dawŋgari dawɣř tauacutenkaritukara poroacutep

(Austerlitz 1968 135)

212 Ikegami (1980 1990 1994) Krejnovich (1955)

Uilta(Tungusic)

Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh Manchu

(Tungusic)

hundred taŋgu tanku ɲřaŋq tanggū

Russian luča nuca ločrsquoa

dog collar xala seta hana hal(ŋ)

chopsticks sabuu saxha črsquoafq sabka

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

13

22 Previous studies on language contact at grammatical level

14

With regard to grammatical aspect relevantresearch still remains at its early stage and isextremely limited as attested below

-Tsumagari (1997b)-Yamada (2008)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-kkәә -ka -xә

15

Tsumagari (1997b) shows that there is a morpho-syntactic similarity in noun coordinative forms inUilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh

∙ Uilta (Tungusic)2-1) sii-kkәә bii-kkәә ŋәnnee-pu

2SGNOM-COOR 1SGNOM-COOR go+PTCPPST-1PLʻYou and I wentʼ

(Ikegami 1994160)∙ Sakhalin Ainu 2-2) ohkayo-ka mahtekuh-ka okaya-hci

man-COOR woman-COOR be(PL)-PLʻThere are men and womenʼ

(Hattori 1981[1964]325)∙ Nivkh2-3) vәtәk-xә vәmәk-xә maŋgut ezmu-drsquo-gu

father-COOR mother-COOR very beglad-FINIT-PLʻHis father and mother are very gladʼ

(Panfilov 1962165)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

222 Yamada (2008)

-Sakhalin Ainu manu-Uilta =ndAA-Nivkh furu

17

Yamada (2008) focuses on a possibility oflanguage contact in hearsay forms frequentlyconfirmed in folklores in Uilta Sakhalin Ainuand Nivkh

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

211 Austerlitz (1968)

bearded seal (Erignathus barbatus nauticus Pallas)

Uilta Ainu Nivkh

~1 year old amɔspi amsp amuacutespe

~2 year old ceeŋa the-ŋa(ciyanka)

~3 year old ɔǰii the-ŋa-aki

more than 3 years old dәriәәci

grown dawŋgari dawɣř tauacutenkaritukara poroacutep

(Austerlitz 1968 135)

212 Ikegami (1980 1990 1994) Krejnovich (1955)

Uilta(Tungusic)

Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh Manchu

(Tungusic)

hundred taŋgu tanku ɲřaŋq tanggū

Russian luča nuca ločrsquoa

dog collar xala seta hana hal(ŋ)

chopsticks sabuu saxha črsquoafq sabka

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

13

22 Previous studies on language contact at grammatical level

14

With regard to grammatical aspect relevantresearch still remains at its early stage and isextremely limited as attested below

-Tsumagari (1997b)-Yamada (2008)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-kkәә -ka -xә

15

Tsumagari (1997b) shows that there is a morpho-syntactic similarity in noun coordinative forms inUilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh

∙ Uilta (Tungusic)2-1) sii-kkәә bii-kkәә ŋәnnee-pu

2SGNOM-COOR 1SGNOM-COOR go+PTCPPST-1PLʻYou and I wentʼ

(Ikegami 1994160)∙ Sakhalin Ainu 2-2) ohkayo-ka mahtekuh-ka okaya-hci

man-COOR woman-COOR be(PL)-PLʻThere are men and womenʼ

(Hattori 1981[1964]325)∙ Nivkh2-3) vәtәk-xә vәmәk-xә maŋgut ezmu-drsquo-gu

father-COOR mother-COOR very beglad-FINIT-PLʻHis father and mother are very gladʼ

(Panfilov 1962165)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

222 Yamada (2008)

-Sakhalin Ainu manu-Uilta =ndAA-Nivkh furu

17

Yamada (2008) focuses on a possibility oflanguage contact in hearsay forms frequentlyconfirmed in folklores in Uilta Sakhalin Ainuand Nivkh

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

212 Ikegami (1980 1990 1994) Krejnovich (1955)

Uilta(Tungusic)

Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh Manchu

(Tungusic)

hundred taŋgu tanku ɲřaŋq tanggū

Russian luča nuca ločrsquoa

dog collar xala seta hana hal(ŋ)

chopsticks sabuu saxha črsquoafq sabka

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

13

22 Previous studies on language contact at grammatical level

14

With regard to grammatical aspect relevantresearch still remains at its early stage and isextremely limited as attested below

-Tsumagari (1997b)-Yamada (2008)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-kkәә -ka -xә

15

Tsumagari (1997b) shows that there is a morpho-syntactic similarity in noun coordinative forms inUilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh

∙ Uilta (Tungusic)2-1) sii-kkәә bii-kkәә ŋәnnee-pu

2SGNOM-COOR 1SGNOM-COOR go+PTCPPST-1PLʻYou and I wentʼ

(Ikegami 1994160)∙ Sakhalin Ainu 2-2) ohkayo-ka mahtekuh-ka okaya-hci

man-COOR woman-COOR be(PL)-PLʻThere are men and womenʼ

(Hattori 1981[1964]325)∙ Nivkh2-3) vәtәk-xә vәmәk-xә maŋgut ezmu-drsquo-gu

father-COOR mother-COOR very beglad-FINIT-PLʻHis father and mother are very gladʼ

(Panfilov 1962165)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

222 Yamada (2008)

-Sakhalin Ainu manu-Uilta =ndAA-Nivkh furu

17

Yamada (2008) focuses on a possibility oflanguage contact in hearsay forms frequentlyconfirmed in folklores in Uilta Sakhalin Ainuand Nivkh

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

22 Language contact at grammatical levelbetween Tungusic and Ainu

13

22 Previous studies on language contact at grammatical level

14

With regard to grammatical aspect relevantresearch still remains at its early stage and isextremely limited as attested below

-Tsumagari (1997b)-Yamada (2008)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-kkәә -ka -xә

15

Tsumagari (1997b) shows that there is a morpho-syntactic similarity in noun coordinative forms inUilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh

∙ Uilta (Tungusic)2-1) sii-kkәә bii-kkәә ŋәnnee-pu

2SGNOM-COOR 1SGNOM-COOR go+PTCPPST-1PLʻYou and I wentʼ

(Ikegami 1994160)∙ Sakhalin Ainu 2-2) ohkayo-ka mahtekuh-ka okaya-hci

man-COOR woman-COOR be(PL)-PLʻThere are men and womenʼ

(Hattori 1981[1964]325)∙ Nivkh2-3) vәtәk-xә vәmәk-xә maŋgut ezmu-drsquo-gu

father-COOR mother-COOR very beglad-FINIT-PLʻHis father and mother are very gladʼ

(Panfilov 1962165)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

222 Yamada (2008)

-Sakhalin Ainu manu-Uilta =ndAA-Nivkh furu

17

Yamada (2008) focuses on a possibility oflanguage contact in hearsay forms frequentlyconfirmed in folklores in Uilta Sakhalin Ainuand Nivkh

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

22 Previous studies on language contact at grammatical level

14

With regard to grammatical aspect relevantresearch still remains at its early stage and isextremely limited as attested below

-Tsumagari (1997b)-Yamada (2008)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-kkәә -ka -xә

15

Tsumagari (1997b) shows that there is a morpho-syntactic similarity in noun coordinative forms inUilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh

∙ Uilta (Tungusic)2-1) sii-kkәә bii-kkәә ŋәnnee-pu

2SGNOM-COOR 1SGNOM-COOR go+PTCPPST-1PLʻYou and I wentʼ

(Ikegami 1994160)∙ Sakhalin Ainu 2-2) ohkayo-ka mahtekuh-ka okaya-hci

man-COOR woman-COOR be(PL)-PLʻThere are men and womenʼ

(Hattori 1981[1964]325)∙ Nivkh2-3) vәtәk-xә vәmәk-xә maŋgut ezmu-drsquo-gu

father-COOR mother-COOR very beglad-FINIT-PLʻHis father and mother are very gladʼ

(Panfilov 1962165)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

222 Yamada (2008)

-Sakhalin Ainu manu-Uilta =ndAA-Nivkh furu

17

Yamada (2008) focuses on a possibility oflanguage contact in hearsay forms frequentlyconfirmed in folklores in Uilta Sakhalin Ainuand Nivkh

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-kkәә -ka -xә

15

Tsumagari (1997b) shows that there is a morpho-syntactic similarity in noun coordinative forms inUilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh

∙ Uilta (Tungusic)2-1) sii-kkәә bii-kkәә ŋәnnee-pu

2SGNOM-COOR 1SGNOM-COOR go+PTCPPST-1PLʻYou and I wentʼ

(Ikegami 1994160)∙ Sakhalin Ainu 2-2) ohkayo-ka mahtekuh-ka okaya-hci

man-COOR woman-COOR be(PL)-PLʻThere are men and womenʼ

(Hattori 1981[1964]325)∙ Nivkh2-3) vәtәk-xә vәmәk-xә maŋgut ezmu-drsquo-gu

father-COOR mother-COOR very beglad-FINIT-PLʻHis father and mother are very gladʼ

(Panfilov 1962165)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

222 Yamada (2008)

-Sakhalin Ainu manu-Uilta =ndAA-Nivkh furu

17

Yamada (2008) focuses on a possibility oflanguage contact in hearsay forms frequentlyconfirmed in folklores in Uilta Sakhalin Ainuand Nivkh

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

∙ Uilta (Tungusic)2-1) sii-kkәә bii-kkәә ŋәnnee-pu

2SGNOM-COOR 1SGNOM-COOR go+PTCPPST-1PLʻYou and I wentʼ

(Ikegami 1994160)∙ Sakhalin Ainu 2-2) ohkayo-ka mahtekuh-ka okaya-hci

man-COOR woman-COOR be(PL)-PLʻThere are men and womenʼ

(Hattori 1981[1964]325)∙ Nivkh2-3) vәtәk-xә vәmәk-xә maŋgut ezmu-drsquo-gu

father-COOR mother-COOR very beglad-FINIT-PLʻHis father and mother are very gladʼ

(Panfilov 1962165)

221 Tsumagari (1997b)

222 Yamada (2008)

-Sakhalin Ainu manu-Uilta =ndAA-Nivkh furu

17

Yamada (2008) focuses on a possibility oflanguage contact in hearsay forms frequentlyconfirmed in folklores in Uilta Sakhalin Ainuand Nivkh

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

222 Yamada (2008)

-Sakhalin Ainu manu-Uilta =ndAA-Nivkh furu

17

Yamada (2008) focuses on a possibility oflanguage contact in hearsay forms frequentlyconfirmed in folklores in Uilta Sakhalin Ainuand Nivkh

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

222 Yamada (2008)

18

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

hearsay form wendeunde =ndAA manu furu

grammaticalization - + + +

rising intonation - + + +

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

23 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

19

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

231 Gruzdeva (1996) Tsumagari (2009c)

Gruzdeva (1996 1008) characterizes thelinguistic situation in Uilta Ainu and Nivkh asmultilingualism

20

Concentrating on grammatical and lexicalsimilarities among Uilta Ainu and NivkhTsumagari (2009c 6) raises a possibility ofconsidering Sakhalin Island as linguistic area

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

232 Yamada (2010)

21Linsuistic lsquostratarsquo on Sakhalin (Yamada 2010 71)

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics3 Tungusic and Ainu from the perspective of areal linguistics

22

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

311 Objective

The focus will be placed on plural suffixes listedbelow in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh inSakhalin Island

23

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

312 Typological parameters

24

In this presentation the following 3 typologicalparameters will be applied to the previouslymentioned three plural suffixes in Uilta SakhalinAinu and Nivkh

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

32 Relevant Previous studies

Baek (2016) raises a possibility that numberdistinction between the third person singularand plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic languageshowing remarkable similarities with those ofneighboring languages

25

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

From the cross-linguistic perspective ofwhere to mark the number between the thirdperson singular and plural the personmarking type of languages can be groupedas 4 patterns

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

26

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

A PERSON MARKING TYPE(i) both-marking (3SG + 3PL +)(ii) 3SG-marking (3SG + 3PL -oslash)(iii) 3PL-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL +)(iv) zero-marking (3SG -oslash 3PL -oslash)

B NON-PERSON MARKING TYPE

27

321 Typological parameter in Baek (2016)

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

322 North Tungusic

Hezhen

28

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

∙ 3rd person singular 3-1) asatkan ǰu-du tǝge-t-čǝ-rǝ-n

girl house-DAT sitdown-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3SGʻThe girl is sitting at homeʼ

(Nedjalkov 1997 248)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-2) digin oron-duu ugu-ča-ǰa-ra-oslash

four deer-DAT ride-STAT-IMPF-PRS-3PLʻ[They] are riding on four reindeerʼ

(Bulatova and grenoble 1999 32)

322 Evenki

29

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

322 Third person markings in North Tungusic

Evenki Even

3SG -n -n

3PL -oslash (-r)

number-marking 3SG-marking 3SG or both-marking

number-distinction obligatorily-distinct obligatorily-distinct

30

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

323 East Tungusic

Hezhen

31

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

∙ 3rd person plural3-3) ǰuә mapa-kaan piktә-ni biә undә

two bear-DIM child-3SG bePRS3 say

kupilәә-ndu-mәәri=ә biә undәplayaround-DIST-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS3 say

ʻThey say that there are two small bears and they are playing around ʼ(Kazama 2001 52)

323 Nanay

∙ 3rd person plural3-4) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say

tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

∙ 3rd person plural3-5) sii mimbiǝ baogo-xam-ba-si saa-xam-bari osini youSGNOM IACC find-PTCPPST-ACC-2SG know-PTCPPST-REFPL if

mimbiǝ ǰi-dǝǝ waa-ǰaraa-oslashIACC come-ANTCVB kill-FUT-3

ʻIf they know that you find me they will come and kill meʼ(Kazama 2010 137)

3-6) ǝi-du xǝm waa-go-ǰaa-l tǝi ŋǝwǝǝ-sǝl this-DAT all kill-REP-FUT-3PL that devil-PL

ʻThose devils will kill all hereʼ(Kazama 2010 146)

323 Nanay

33

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

323 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Ulcha Nanay Uilta Udihe

3SG -oslash -oslash -oslash -oslash

3PL (-l) (-l) (-l) (-du)

Number-marking zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL zero or 3PL

Number-distinction

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

optionally-distinct

34

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

324 South Tungusic

Hezhen

35

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

∙ 3rd person singular 3-7a) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3SGʻ(S)he sleepsʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Solon

∙ 3rd person plural3-7b) aasin-a-n

sleep-PRS-3PL ʻThey sleepʼ

(Tsumagari 2009b 9)

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

324 Third person markings in South Tungusic

Solon Hezhen Manchu (Sibe)

3SG -n (-n) -

3PL -n (-n) -

Number-marking both both or zero non-person

Number-distinction non-distinct non-distinct non-person

37

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

325 Summary of Baek (2016)North

darrSouth

3SG 3PL Number-marking Number-distinction

Ek (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

E (I) -n (-r) 3SG or both obligatorily-distinct

N (I) -n -oslash 3SG obligatorily-distinct

Ol (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Nn (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

Ut (III) -oslash (-l) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

U (II) -oslash (-du) zero or 3PL optionally-distinct

S (I) -n -n both non-distinct

Hz (II) (-n) (-n) zero or both non-distinct

M (IV) Non-person marking type

Sb (IV) Non-person marking type

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

33 Summary of Baek (2016)

Hezhen

Obligatorily-distinct

Non-distinct

Zero or 3PL marking and optionally-distinct

Non-person marking

Buryat

Dagur

Khamnigan

Sakha

K Yukaghir

Uyghur Kazakh

39

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

33 Summary

i) Number distinction between the third personsingular and plural in Tungusic shows a clearvariation in accordance with its geographicaldistribution of each Tungusic language showingremarkable similarities with those of neighboringlanguages

ii) However this research does not include Ainuand Nivkh in its discussion

40

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

34 Typological parameters

41

a) Appearance nouns andor verbs

b) Function third person plural marking

c) Usage obligatory or optional

Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

-l -hci(n) -gu(n)

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

341 Uiltai) Appearance on nouns

-nari-l lsquomen peoplersquoperson-PL-ulaa-l lsquoreindeerrsquoreindeer-PL-buwaata-l lsquoislandsrsquoisland-PL

In general the use of plural forms is somewhat emphatic andthe unmarked form is also employed to refer to plural entitiesespecially when preceded by a numeral or a quantitativeadjective

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

(Tsumagari 2009a 6)

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

∙ 3rd person plural 3-8) sinǰeellaa-l tari nari-sal

come+FUT-3 that person-PL ʻThose persons will comeʼ

(Ikegami 2002 134)

341 Uilta

ii) Appearance on verbsYamada (2013) reports that the nominal element -l isan optional element to denote the third person pluralin Uilta

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

341 Other Tungusic languages -Nanayi) Appearance on nouns

-ŋәwәә-sәl lsquodevilsrsquodevil-PL-naonǰokaa-sal lsquoboysrsquoboy-PL

ii) Appearance on verbs∙ 3rd person plural3-9) tәwәksә ojalani tooko-maari=o biә-l undә

cloud upside climb-SIMCVBPL=CLT bePRS-3PL say tәi mapakaa-sal=golathat smallbear-PL=CLT

ʻThey say Those small bears is climbing over the upside of the cloudʼ(Kazama 2001 58)

The suffix -l in Nanay andUlcha does notsynchronically function as anominal plural marker

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

341 Third person markings in East Tungusic

Nanay (III) Ulcha (III) Uilta (III)

Nouns - - +

Verbs + + +

3PL marking + + +Usage optional optional optional

-plural suffix -l can optionally mark 3PL subject-however its synchronic use as nominal plural marker islimited to Uilta

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

i) Appearance on nouns Murasaki (1979 85) notes that nominal possessive pluralsuffix -hcin is attached to nounsIn case of a majority ofcertain person or thing it is an obligatory element

(Murasaki 1979 85)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

rsquoeci-seta-ha-hcin lsquoyour dogsrsquo2PL-dog-POS-PL

ku-mici-hi-hcin lsquomy grandsonsrsquo1SG-grandson-POS-PL

(Murasaki 1979 85)

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

ii) Appearance on verbsThe plural verb forms in Sakhalin involve both suppletiveforms which are shared by the Hokkaido dialects and theunique suffix -hci which is apparently related to thenominal plural suffix -hcin ~ Despite this kind of over-marking of the plural suffix the marking itself still remainsoptional unlike the number-sensitive agreement of personalaffixes

(Shibatani 1990 54)

342 Sakhalin Ainu

47

3-10) Orohko-utah ariki-hci Orokko-PL come(PL)-PL

ʻOrokos cameʼ(Shibatani 1990 53)

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

342 Hokkaido Ainu

∙ 3rd person singular3-11) itak-oslash

speak-3SG ʻ(S)he speaksʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)∙ 3rd person singular3-12) itak-oslash

speak-3PLʻThey speakʼ

(Shibatani 1990 25-26)

In Hokkaido Ainu there is no nominal plural marker tobe attached to verbs in order to distinguish the thirdperson plural subject from the third person singular

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

Appearance on nounsverbsPlural marker on nouns is mostly optional It is particularlyrare in the case forms other than the nominativeSometimes however native speakers insist on pluralmarking ~ Expression of the plural marking on thenominal subject is not connected with plural marking of theverbal predicate

(Nedjalkov amp Otaina 201349)

343 Nivkh

49

The -gun as nominal plural suffix is obligatory while itis an optional element in verbs

(Tangiku 2012 116)

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

∙ 3rd person singular3-13) qanŋ ve-d

dog go-FINITʻA dog wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)∙ 3rd person plural3-14) qan-gun ve-d

dog-PL go-FINITʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)3-15) qan-gun ve-d-ɣun

dog-PL go-FINIT-PLʻDogs wentʼ

(Tangiku 2012 116)

343 Nivkh

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

35 Plural endings in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

Nanay Ulcha Uilta Sakhalin Ainu Nivkh

nouns - + + +

verbs + + + +

3PL marking + + + +

usage optional optional NobligatoryV optional

NobligatoryV optional

51

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

4 Conclusion4 Conclusion

52

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

4 Conclusion

i) Uilta shows a clear difference from other East Tungusiclanguages in that the plural element -l is synchronicallyemployed in both nouns and verbs

ii) Plural suffixes in Uilta Sakhalin Ainu and Nivkh showsimilarities in their appearance in nouns and verbsfunctioning as an optional third person plural marker

iii) However its usage as nominal plural marker in nounswhether it is obligatory or optional shows a disparity

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

ReferencesAusterlitz R (1968) Native seal nomenclatures in South-Sahalin Ann Arbor Panel on Far Eastern

Language Institutes of the Committee on Institutional CooperationBaek S (2016) ldquoChiiki ruikeironteki kanten kara mita tsunguusu shogo no teidoushi ni okeru sanninshou

hyoujirdquo[=Third person marking on finite indicative forms from the perspective of areal typology]Northern language studies 6 53-72

Bulatova Nadezhda and L Grenoble (1999) Evenki Muumlnchen Newcastle Lincom EuropaGruzdeva E J (1996) ldquoThe Linguistic Situation on Sakhalin Islandrdquo In S A Wurm P Muumlhlhaumlusler D T

Tryon (eds) Atlas of Languages of Intercultural Communication in the Pacific Asia and AmericasVol 3 1007-1012 Berlin New York Mouton de Gruyter

Hattori T (1952 [2004]) ldquoKarafuto Giriyakugo no gyoryo goirdquo [=Nivkh fishing vocabulary]Jinruikagaku 4

Hattori S (1981[1964]) Ainugo Hougen Jiten [=An Ainu dialect Dictionary] IwanamishotenIkegami J (1974) ldquoVersuch einer Klassifikation der tungusischen Sprache SpracheGeschichte und

Kultur der Altaischen Voumllker Protokollband der XII Tagung der Permanent international AltaischeConference 1969 in Berlin 271- 272 Berlin Akademie Verlag

Ikegami J (1980) ldquoAinugo no ldquoinaurdquo no go no yurai ni kansuru shokoordquo [=Remarks on the origin of theAinu word ldquoinaurdquo] Mk 44 393-402

Ikegami J (1988) ldquoKotoba no uekara mita touhoku ajia to nihonrdquo [=Northeastern Asia and Japan from theperspective of words] Hokkaido no Bunka 59 34-44

Ikegami J (1990) ldquoNihogokita no gengokan no tangoshakuyourdquo [=Words borrowing between Japaneseand Northern languages] Hokkaidou Hougen Kennkyuukai Kaihou 30 2-11

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

ReferencesIkegami J (1994) ldquoAinu-go no tairiku goteki yoosordquo Ainu-go no tsudoi Sapporo 159ndash169Ikegami J (2002) Uiruta koutou bungei genbunshuu [=Uilta Oral Literature A Collection of Texts]

(ELPR publication series A2-013 Publicatios on Tungus Languages and Cultures 16) SuitaFaculty of Informatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (1996) ldquoGenetical position of Hezhenrdquo Gengo Kenkyu 109 117-139Kazama S (2001) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 6 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 6] (Publications on

Tungus languages and cultures 15) (ELPR Publicat ions Series A2-005) Suita Faculty ofInformatics Osaka Gakuin University

Kazama S (2010) Naanai no Minwa to Densetsu 12 [=Nanay Folk Tales and Legends 12] (Publicationson Tungus languages and cultures 48) Tokyo Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asiaand Africa Tokyo University of Foreign Studies

Kre jnovich E A (1955) Gi lya tsko- tunguso-manrsquochzhursk ie yazykovye para l le l i Doklady iSoobshcheniya Instituta Yazykoznaniya AN SSSR 8 135-167

Murasaki K (1979) Karafuto ainugo Bunpoo-hen [=Sakhalin Ainu Grammar volume] Tokyo Kokushokan-kookaiNedjalkov I V (1997) Evenki London RoutledgeNedjalkov V P and GA Otaina (2013) A Syntax of the Nivkh Language The Amur dialect Amsterdam Philadelphia

John Benjamins Publishing CompanyPanfilov V Z (1962) Grammatika nivkhskogo yazyka 1 ML NaukaShibatani M (1990) The Languages of Japan (Cambridge Language Surveys) Cambridge Cambridge

University PressTangiku I (2003) ldquoNivufugo no sinduX ni tsuite no mijikai kousatsurdquo [=A brief study on sinduX in Nivkh] itahcara 2

itahcara

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University

ReferencesTangiku I (2012) ldquoNivufugo no fukusuuhyouji poronaisukuhougen no -gun no tokushuu youhourdquo [=Plural

Suffix -gun in Poronaysk Dialect of the Nivkh Language] Journal of the Center for NorthernHumanities 5 113-122

Tsumagari T (1997a) ldquoLinguistic diversity and national borders of Tungusicrdquo Shoji H and Janhunen J(eds) Northern minority languages problems of survival (Senri Ethnological Studies No44) 175-186 Suita National Museum of Ethnology

Tsumagari T (1997b) ldquoNivufugo Uirutago Ainugo no meishi heiretsu kouzourdquo [=Noun coordinativestructure in Nivkh Uilta and Ain] Languages of the North Pacific Rim Vol 3 131-142

Tsumagari T (2009a) Grammatical outline of Uilta (Revised) Journal of the Graduate School of Letters4 1-21

Tsumagari T (2009b) ldquoA sketch of Solon grammarrdquo Journal of the center for Northern Humanities 2 1-21Tsumagari T (2009c) ldquoSaharin no gengo sekai tango shakuyoukara mirurdquo [=The linguistic world of Sakhalin viewed

from lexical borrowing] Linguistic World of Sakhalin Proceedings of the Symposium 1-10Yamada Y (2008) ldquoUirutago koutoubungei no denbun keisiki saharin ni okeru gengosesshoku no

kanouseirdquo [=Hearsay form in Uilta folklore A possible language contact in Sakhalin] HokkaidoEthnological Society 4 63-71

Yamada Y (2010) ldquoA preliminary study of language contacts around Uilta on Sakhalinrdquo Journal of the Center forNorthern humanities 3 59-75

Yamada Y (2013) Uirutago Kitahougenno Bunpou to Gengo sesshoku nikansuru Kenkyuu [=Grammar onthe northern dialect of Uilta and research on language contact] PhD Dissertation (unpublished)Hokkaido University